2 \# Source code to NASM documentation
4 \M{category}{Programming}
5 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
7 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
8 \M{license}{All rights reserved. This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "COPYING" distributed in the NASM archive.}
9 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
12 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
13 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
19 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
20 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
21 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
22 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
23 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
24 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
44 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
45 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
46 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
49 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
50 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
52 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
54 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
56 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
58 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
60 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
61 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
62 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
64 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
66 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
67 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
68 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
70 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
72 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
74 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
76 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
77 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
78 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
79 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
80 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
81 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
82 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
83 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
84 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
85 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
87 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
88 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
89 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
90 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
92 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
93 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
94 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
95 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
96 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
97 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
98 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
100 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
101 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
102 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
103 \IA{command line}{command-line}
104 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
105 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
106 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
107 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
108 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
109 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
111 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
112 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
113 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
114 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
117 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
118 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
120 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
121 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
122 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
123 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
125 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
126 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
127 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
128 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
129 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
130 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
131 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
133 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
134 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
135 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
137 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
138 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
139 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
141 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
142 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
143 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
144 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
145 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
146 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
147 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
148 \IR{logical and} logical AND
149 \IR{logical or} logical OR
150 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
152 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
154 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
155 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
156 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
157 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
158 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
159 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
161 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
162 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
164 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
168 \IR{operating system} operating system
170 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
171 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
176 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
177 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
178 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
179 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
180 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
181 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
182 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
183 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
185 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
186 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
187 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
188 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
189 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
190 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
191 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
192 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
193 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
194 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
195 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
196 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
197 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
199 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
200 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
201 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
202 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
203 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
204 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
205 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
207 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
213 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
214 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
215 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
216 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
217 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
218 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
219 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
221 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
222 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
223 \IR{www page} WWW page
227 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
228 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
229 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
230 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
231 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
232 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
233 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
236 \C{intro} Introduction
238 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
240 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
241 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
242 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
243 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
244 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
245 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
246 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
247 strong support for macros.
250 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
252 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
253 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
254 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
255 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
257 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
258 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
260 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
261 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
262 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
263 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
264 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
267 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
268 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
270 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
273 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
274 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
275 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
276 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
277 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
279 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
280 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
281 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
282 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
283 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
284 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
288 \S{legal} License Conditions
290 Please see the file \c{COPYING}, supplied as part of any NASM
291 distribution archive, for the \i{license} conditions under which you
292 may use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called GNU Lesser General
293 Public License, LGPL.
296 \H{contact} Contact Information
298 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
299 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
300 (see below for the link).
301 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
303 NASM has a \i{WWW page} at
304 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}. If it's
305 not there, google for us!
308 The original authors are \i{e\-mail}able as
309 \W{mailto:jules@dsf.org.uk}\c{jules@dsf.org.uk} and
310 \W{mailto:anakin@pobox.com}\c{anakin@pobox.com}.
311 The latter is no longer involved in the development team.
313 \i{New releases} of NASM are uploaded to the official sites
314 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}
316 \W{ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/nasm/}\i\c{ftp.kernel.org}
318 \W{ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/devel/lang/assemblers/}\i\c{ibiblio.org}.
320 Announcements are posted to
321 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
322 \W{news:alt.lang.asm}\i\c{alt.lang.asm} and
323 \W{news:comp.os.linux.announce}\i\c{comp.os.linux.announce}
325 If you want information about NASM beta releases, and the current
326 development status, please subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list
328 \W{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}\c{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}.
331 \H{install} Installation
333 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
335 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
336 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
337 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
338 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
340 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
341 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
342 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
345 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
346 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
347 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
348 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
349 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
350 under other versions of Windows as well.)
352 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
353 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
354 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
355 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
357 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
358 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
359 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
360 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
363 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
364 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
365 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
366 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
367 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
368 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
369 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
370 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
373 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
375 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
376 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
377 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
378 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
379 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
381 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
382 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
383 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
384 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
387 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
388 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
389 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
390 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
391 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
392 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
393 install the programs yourself.
395 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
396 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
397 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
398 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
401 \C{running} Running NASM
403 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
405 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
407 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
411 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
413 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
415 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
417 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
419 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
420 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
421 to give a listing file name, for example:
423 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
425 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
429 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
432 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
437 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
438 installed it). If it says something like
440 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
442 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
443 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
445 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
447 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
448 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
449 and are rare these days.)
451 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
452 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
456 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
458 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
459 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
460 For Microsoft object file formats (\i\c{obj} and \i\c{win32}), it
461 will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
462 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
463 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\i\c{aout},
464 \i\c{coff}, \i\c{elf}, \i\c{macho} and \i\c{as86}) it will substitute \c{.o}. For
465 \i\c{rdf}, it will use \c{.rdf}, and for the \i\c{bin} format it
466 will simply remove the extension, so that \c{myfile.asm} produces
467 the output file \c{myfile}.
469 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
470 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
471 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
473 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
474 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
475 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
476 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
477 an intervening space. For example:
479 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
480 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
482 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
483 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
486 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
488 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
489 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
490 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
491 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
492 choose what you want the default to be.
494 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
495 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
497 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
498 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
501 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
503 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
504 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
505 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
506 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
507 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
508 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
511 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
513 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
514 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
515 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
516 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
517 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
520 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
522 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
523 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
525 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
528 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
530 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
531 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
532 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
533 dependency list without a prefix.
536 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
538 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
539 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
541 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
544 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
546 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
547 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
548 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
549 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
550 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
552 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
555 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
557 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
558 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
559 specified by the \c{-o} option.
562 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
564 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
565 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
566 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
570 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
572 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
573 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
574 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
575 file has been removed.
578 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
580 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
581 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
582 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
583 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
584 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
585 if \c{-F} is specified.
587 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
588 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
589 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
591 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
592 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
593 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
596 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
598 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
599 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
600 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
601 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
602 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
605 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
607 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
608 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
610 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
611 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
612 the default and looks like this:
614 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
616 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
617 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
618 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
619 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
620 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
622 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
623 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
625 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
627 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
628 instead of being delimited by colons.
630 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
632 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
634 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
635 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
636 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
637 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
638 example) you want to load them into an editor.
640 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
641 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
642 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
643 the errors into a file by typing
645 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
647 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
648 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
649 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
651 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
653 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
654 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
655 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
656 program, you can type:
658 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
660 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
663 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
665 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
666 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
667 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
668 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
669 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
670 library}, for example, by typing
672 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
674 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
677 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
678 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
679 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
680 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
681 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
682 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
684 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
685 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
686 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
688 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
689 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
690 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
693 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
694 be specified as \c{-I}.
697 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
699 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
700 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
703 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
705 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
706 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
708 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
709 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
712 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
714 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
715 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
716 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
719 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
721 as an alternative to placing the directive
725 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
726 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
727 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
728 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
731 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
732 be specified as \c{-D}.
735 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
737 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
738 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
739 option specified earlier on the command lines.
741 For example, the following command line:
743 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
745 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
746 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
749 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
750 be specified as \c{-U}.
753 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
755 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
756 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
757 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
758 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
759 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
760 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
762 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
763 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
764 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
766 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
768 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
770 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
771 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
772 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
774 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
776 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
777 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
778 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
779 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
780 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
781 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
784 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
786 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
787 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
788 you have to enable optimization.
790 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
791 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
793 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
794 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
795 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
797 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
798 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
799 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
800 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
802 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
803 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
804 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
805 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
806 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
807 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
809 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses.
811 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
812 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
815 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
817 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
818 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
820 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
822 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
823 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
824 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
825 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
826 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
829 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
830 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
831 \c{include}, \c{local})
833 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} Option: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
835 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
836 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
837 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
838 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
839 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
840 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
843 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
844 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
845 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
846 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
847 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
848 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
849 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
851 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
853 \b \i\c{error} decides if warnings should be treated as errors.
854 It is disabled by default.
856 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
857 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
858 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
859 you might want to disable it.
861 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
862 warning class is disabled by default.
864 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
865 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
866 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
868 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
869 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
870 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
871 see \k{syntax} for more information.
873 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
874 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
876 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
877 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
878 This warning class is disabled by default.
880 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
883 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
886 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
889 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
892 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
895 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
896 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
897 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
898 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
899 (without the brackets) exists.
902 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
904 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
905 and the date on which it was compiled.
907 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
909 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
911 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
912 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
913 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
917 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
918 \c ('*' denotes default):
919 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
920 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
923 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
925 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
926 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
927 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
928 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
929 (but not always) likes it.
932 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
934 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
935 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
936 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
937 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
938 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
940 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
941 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib} will be treated as two separate options.
942 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
943 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
944 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
945 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
947 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
948 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
949 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
950 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
951 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
952 -ic:\\nasmlib}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
954 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
955 changed with version 0.98.31.
958 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
960 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
961 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
962 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
963 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
964 skipping this section.
967 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
969 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
970 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
971 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
972 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
973 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
974 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
975 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
978 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
980 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
981 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
982 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
983 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
984 if you declare, for example,
989 then the two lines of code
994 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
995 identical-looking syntaxes.
997 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
998 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
999 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1000 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1001 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1002 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1003 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1004 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1006 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1007 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1008 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1009 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1010 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1011 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1013 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1014 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1015 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1016 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1017 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1018 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1019 \e{everything} is a label.
1021 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1022 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1023 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1024 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1025 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1026 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1029 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1031 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1032 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1033 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1034 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1035 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1036 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1037 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1039 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1040 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1041 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1042 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1043 the strings being manipulated.
1046 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1048 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1049 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1050 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1051 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1054 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1056 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1057 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1058 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1059 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1060 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1061 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1062 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1063 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1064 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1068 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1070 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1071 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1072 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1073 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1075 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1076 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1077 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1078 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1081 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1083 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1084 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1086 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1087 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1088 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1089 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1090 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1091 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1092 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1094 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1095 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1099 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1101 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1103 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1104 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1105 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1107 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1109 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1110 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1111 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1112 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1114 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1115 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1116 backslash-ended line.
1118 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1119 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1120 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1121 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1122 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1123 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1124 NASM with the command-line option
1125 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1126 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1128 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1129 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1130 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1131 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1132 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1133 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1134 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1135 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1136 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1137 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1139 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1140 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1141 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1142 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1143 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1144 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1145 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1146 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1147 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1148 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1149 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1150 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1151 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1152 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1155 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1156 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1157 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1159 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1160 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1162 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1163 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1164 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1165 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1166 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1167 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1169 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1170 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1171 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1173 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1175 For example, you can code:
1177 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1178 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1180 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1181 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1183 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1184 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1185 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1188 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1190 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1191 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1192 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1193 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1194 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1195 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1196 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1200 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1202 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1203 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1204 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1205 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1207 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1208 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1209 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1210 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1211 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1212 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1213 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1214 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1215 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1216 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1217 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1218 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1219 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1221 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1224 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1226 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1227 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1228 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1229 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1230 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1231 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1232 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1233 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1234 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1238 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1239 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1240 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1241 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1243 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1245 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1246 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1247 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1248 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1251 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1252 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1253 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1254 \c ; actually include at most 512
1256 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1257 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1258 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1259 overridden if desired.
1262 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1264 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1265 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1266 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1267 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1270 \c message db 'hello, world'
1271 \c msglen equ $-message
1273 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1274 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1275 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1276 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1277 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1278 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1281 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1283 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1284 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1285 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1288 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1290 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1291 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1292 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1294 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1295 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1297 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1298 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1299 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1303 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1304 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1305 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1307 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1309 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1310 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1311 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1312 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1313 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1316 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1318 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1319 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1320 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1321 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1326 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1327 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1329 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1330 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1332 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1333 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1335 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1338 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1339 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1342 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1343 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1345 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1346 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1347 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1348 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1349 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1350 bytes to store a zero offset.
1352 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1353 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1354 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1355 default segment registers.
1357 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1358 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1359 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1360 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1361 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1362 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1363 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1364 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1365 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1366 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1367 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1369 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1370 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1371 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1372 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1373 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1374 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1375 the offset to be lost.
1377 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1378 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1379 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1380 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1381 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1382 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1384 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1385 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1386 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1387 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1390 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1392 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1393 character, string and floating-point.
1396 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1398 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1399 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1400 suffix \c{H}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} for \i{hex}, \i{octal} and \i{binary},
1401 or you can prefix \c{0x} for hex in the style of C, or you can
1402 prefix \c{$} for hex in the style of Borland Pascal. Note, though,
1403 that the \I{$, prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on
1404 identifiers (see \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$}
1405 sign must have a digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter.
1407 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1412 \c mov ax,100 ; decimal
1413 \c mov ax,0a2h ; hex
1414 \c mov ax,$0a2 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1415 \c mov ax,0xa2 ; hex yet again
1416 \c mov ax,777q ; octal
1417 \c mov ax,777o ; octal again
1418 \c mov ax,10010011b ; binary
1419 \c mov ax,1001_0011b ; same binary constant
1422 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1424 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1425 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1426 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1427 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1428 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1429 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1430 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1433 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1435 \c \' single quote (')
1436 \c \" double quote (")
1438 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1439 \c \? question mark (?)
1447 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1448 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1449 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1450 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1451 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1453 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1454 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1457 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1458 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1460 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1461 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1462 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1465 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1467 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1468 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1470 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1471 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1475 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1476 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1477 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1478 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1479 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1482 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1484 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1485 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1486 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1487 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1488 certain preprocessor directives.
1490 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1491 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1492 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1494 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1495 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1497 And the following are also equivalent:
1499 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1500 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1501 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1503 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1504 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1505 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1506 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1507 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1508 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1510 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1512 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1513 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1514 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1518 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1519 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1521 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1522 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1524 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1525 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1526 an expression context.
1528 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1530 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1531 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1532 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1533 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1534 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1535 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1537 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1538 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1539 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1540 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1541 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant. NASM also
1542 support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x}, hexadecimal
1543 digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then optionally a
1544 \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent in decimal
1547 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1548 floating-point constants as well.
1552 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1553 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1554 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1555 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1556 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1557 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1558 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1559 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1560 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1561 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1562 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1564 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1565 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1566 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1567 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1568 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1570 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1571 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1572 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1573 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1574 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1575 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1576 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1577 floating-point number, respectively.
1581 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1583 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1584 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1586 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1588 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1589 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1590 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1591 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1592 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1593 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1594 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1595 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1596 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1598 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1599 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1600 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1601 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1603 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1604 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1606 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1608 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1610 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1611 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1612 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1614 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1619 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1620 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1625 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1627 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1628 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1631 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1632 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1633 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1634 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1635 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1636 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1637 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1639 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1640 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1643 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1645 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1646 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1647 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1650 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1652 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1655 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1657 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1660 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1662 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1663 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1664 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1665 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1666 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1669 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1670 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1672 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1676 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1677 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1679 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1680 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1681 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1682 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1683 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1685 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1686 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1688 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1689 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1690 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1693 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1694 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1696 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1697 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1698 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1699 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1700 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1701 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1704 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1706 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1707 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1708 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1709 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1711 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1712 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1713 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1715 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1719 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1721 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1722 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1723 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1724 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1725 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1727 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1729 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1731 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1732 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1734 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1735 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1736 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1737 could code either of
1739 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1740 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1742 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1743 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1746 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1747 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1748 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1750 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1753 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1755 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1756 invent one using the macro processor.
1759 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1761 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1762 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1763 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1764 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1765 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1766 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1767 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1771 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1773 \c push strict dword 33
1775 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1778 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1779 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1782 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1784 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1785 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1786 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1788 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1789 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1790 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1791 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1792 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1794 \c times (label-$) db 0
1795 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1797 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1798 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1799 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1800 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1803 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1804 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1806 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1809 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1810 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1811 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1812 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1813 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1815 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1817 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1818 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1819 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1820 label. So, for example:
1822 \c label1 ; some code
1830 \c label2 ; some code
1838 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1839 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1840 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1841 previous non-local label.
1843 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1844 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1845 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1846 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1847 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1848 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1849 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1852 \c label3 ; some more code
1857 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1858 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1859 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1860 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1861 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1862 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1863 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1864 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1865 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1866 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1868 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1869 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1870 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1871 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1872 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1874 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1876 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1877 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1878 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}).
1881 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1883 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1884 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1885 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1886 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1889 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1890 character into a single line. Thus:
1892 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1895 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1898 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1900 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1902 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1903 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1906 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1907 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1909 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
1911 which will expand to
1913 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
1915 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
1916 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
1917 not at definition time. Thus the code
1919 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
1924 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
1925 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
1927 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
1928 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
1929 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
1930 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
1931 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
1932 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
1935 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
1936 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
1937 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
1938 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
1941 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
1945 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
1946 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
1947 for an example of its use.
1949 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
1950 macros: if you write
1952 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
1953 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
1955 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
1956 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
1957 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
1962 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
1963 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
1964 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
1966 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
1967 perfectly well define a macro with
1971 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
1975 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
1976 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
1977 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
1979 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
1980 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
1983 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
1985 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
1986 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
1987 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
1988 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
1989 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
1991 Suppose you have the following code:
1994 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2003 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2004 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2005 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2006 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2007 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2010 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2011 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2012 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2014 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2015 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2016 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2020 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2024 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2025 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2026 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2029 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2031 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2032 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2033 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2035 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2036 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2038 As an example, consider the following:
2040 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2042 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2048 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2051 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2052 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2054 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2055 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2057 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2059 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2061 Now the above code can be written as:
2063 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2064 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2066 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2067 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2070 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2072 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2073 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2074 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2075 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2076 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2077 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2081 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2093 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2095 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2096 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2098 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2100 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2102 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2103 example, the following sequence:
2110 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2111 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2113 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2114 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2118 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2120 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2121 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2122 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2123 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2125 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2126 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2127 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2128 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2130 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2131 later, so you can do things like
2135 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2137 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2138 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2139 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2141 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2142 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2143 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2144 involving a register).
2147 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2149 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2150 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2151 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2156 \c %defstr test TEST
2160 \c %define test 'TEST'
2162 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2165 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2168 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2170 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2171 supports two simple string handling macro operators from which
2172 more complex operations can be constructed.
2174 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2175 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro.
2177 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2179 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2180 a single-line macro. In doing so, it may change the type of quotes
2181 and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings in order to
2182 make sure the string is still a valid quoted string.
2186 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2188 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2191 \c %strcat beta '"', "'"
2193 ... would assign the value \c{`"'`} to \c{beta}.
2195 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2198 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2200 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2203 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2205 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2206 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2207 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2208 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2210 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2211 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2213 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2214 assigned the value of 9.
2217 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2219 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2220 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2221 than the description:
2223 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2224 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2225 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2226 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2227 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2228 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2230 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2231 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2232 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2233 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2234 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2235 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2236 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2237 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2238 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2241 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2243 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2244 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2247 \c %macro prologue 1
2255 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2256 invoke the macro with a call such as
2258 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2260 which would expand to the three lines of code
2266 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2267 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2268 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2269 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2270 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2273 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2274 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2276 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2277 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2278 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2287 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2288 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2289 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2292 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2294 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2295 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2296 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2297 parameters at all. So you could define
2299 \c %macro prologue 0
2306 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2307 allocates no local stack space.
2309 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2310 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2319 so that you could code
2321 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2322 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2324 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2325 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2326 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2327 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2328 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2329 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2332 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2334 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2335 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2336 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2337 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2338 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2339 flag is set by doing this:
2349 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2350 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2351 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2352 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2353 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2354 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2355 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2356 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2357 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2360 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2362 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2363 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2364 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2365 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2366 you might want to be able to write
2368 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2370 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2371 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2372 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2373 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2376 \c %macro writefile 2+
2382 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2389 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2390 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2391 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2392 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2395 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2396 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2399 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2400 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2401 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2402 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2403 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2404 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2405 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2408 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2409 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2412 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2414 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2415 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2418 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2421 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2423 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2424 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2425 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2427 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2435 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2436 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2437 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2438 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2439 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2441 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2442 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2443 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2444 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2446 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2448 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2449 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2450 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2451 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2453 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2454 too many default parameters:
2456 \c %macro quux 1 something
2458 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2460 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2461 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2462 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2463 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2464 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2466 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2467 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2468 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2469 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2470 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2472 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2473 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2474 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2476 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2478 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2479 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2480 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2483 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2485 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2486 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2487 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2488 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2489 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2490 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2493 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2495 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2496 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2497 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2498 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2499 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2500 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2502 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2503 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2504 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2505 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2507 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2508 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2509 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2510 parameters are rotated to the right.
2512 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2513 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2515 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2524 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2525 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2526 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2527 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2528 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2529 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2530 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2532 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2533 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2534 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2536 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2537 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2538 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2539 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2540 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2541 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2542 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2544 This can be done by the following definition:
2546 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2555 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2556 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2557 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2558 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2559 iterated through in reverse order.
2562 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2564 NASM can concatenate macro parameters on to other text surrounding
2565 them. This allows you to declare a family of symbols, for example,
2566 in a macro definition. If, for example, you wanted to generate a
2567 table of key codes along with offsets into the table, you could code
2570 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2572 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2578 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2579 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2580 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2582 which would expand to
2585 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2587 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2589 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2592 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2593 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2595 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2596 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2597 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2598 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2599 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2600 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2601 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2603 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2604 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2605 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2606 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2607 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2608 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2609 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2610 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2611 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2612 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2614 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2617 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2619 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2620 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2621 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2622 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2623 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2624 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2627 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2628 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2629 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2630 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2640 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2641 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2642 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2645 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2646 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2647 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2648 because no inverse condition code exists.
2651 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2653 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2654 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2655 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2656 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2657 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2660 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2661 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2662 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2663 the number of parameters, like this:
2665 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2669 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2671 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2673 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2674 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2675 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2676 that argument specification.
2685 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2692 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2693 specification does not match exactly.
2695 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2697 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2698 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2699 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2702 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2703 \c %elif<condition2>
2704 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2706 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2709 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2711 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2712 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2714 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2715 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2716 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2717 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2719 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2720 single-line macro existence}
2722 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2723 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2724 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2725 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2727 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2730 \c ; perform some function
2732 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2734 \c ; go and do something else
2736 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2737 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2738 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2740 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2741 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2742 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2746 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2747 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2749 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2750 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2752 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2753 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2754 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2757 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2758 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2760 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2762 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2766 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2768 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2774 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2775 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2778 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2779 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2780 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2783 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2786 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2787 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2788 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2789 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2790 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2792 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2793 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
2796 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
2797 arbitrary numeric expressions}
2799 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
2800 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
2801 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
2802 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
2803 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
2805 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
2806 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
2808 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
2809 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
2810 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
2811 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
2812 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
2813 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
2814 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
2815 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
2816 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
2817 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
2818 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
2819 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
2820 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
2821 for true and 0 for false.
2823 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
2824 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
2826 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
2827 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
2829 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
2830 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
2831 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
2832 Differences in white space are not counted.
2834 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
2836 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
2837 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
2839 \c %macro pushparam 1
2850 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
2851 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
2852 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
2853 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
2855 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
2856 Types\I{testing, token types}
2858 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
2859 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
2860 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
2861 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
2864 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
2865 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
2866 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
2867 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
2868 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
2870 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
2871 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
2873 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
2882 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
2883 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2894 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
2895 the following two ways:
2897 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
2898 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
2900 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
2901 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
2902 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
2903 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
2905 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
2906 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
2907 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
2908 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
2909 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
2911 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
2912 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
2913 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
2914 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
2916 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
2918 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
2919 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
2920 versus a multi-token sequence.
2922 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
2923 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
2924 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
2930 will assemble the subsequent code, but
2934 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
2935 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
2937 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
2938 variants are also provided.
2940 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
2942 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
2943 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
2944 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
2946 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
2947 variants are also provided.
2949 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
2951 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
2952 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
2953 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
2954 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
2956 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
2957 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
2958 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
2959 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
2963 \c inc word [table+2*i]
2967 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
2968 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
2971 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
2972 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
2973 terminate the loop, like this:
2988 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
2990 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
2991 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
2992 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
2993 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
2994 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
2995 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
2998 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3000 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3002 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3004 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3005 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3006 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3008 \c %include "macros.mac"
3010 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3011 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3013 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3014 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3015 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3016 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3017 line using the \c{-i} option.
3019 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3020 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3023 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3024 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3025 \c ; now define some macros
3028 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3029 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3030 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3032 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3033 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3034 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3037 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3039 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3040 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3041 be the include-path-resolved verson of the filename, if the file
3042 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3046 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3048 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3049 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3052 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3054 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3055 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3056 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3058 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3059 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3060 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3062 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3063 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3068 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3069 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3070 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3073 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3075 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3076 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3077 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3078 described in \k{macropkg}.
3080 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3081 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted; using
3082 quotes will prevent unwanted macro expansion. Thus, the following
3083 lines are equivalent, unless \c{altreg} is defined as a macro:
3088 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3089 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3090 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3092 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3094 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3095 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3096 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3097 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3098 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3099 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3100 able to nest these loops.
3102 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3103 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3104 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3105 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3106 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3109 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3110 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3112 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3113 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} requires one argument,
3114 which is the name of the context. For example:
3118 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can
3119 have several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can
3120 still be distinguished.
3122 The directive \c{%pop}, requiring no arguments, removes the top
3123 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3124 labels associated with it.
3127 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3129 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3130 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3131 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3132 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3133 above could be implemented by means of:
3149 and invoked by means of, for example,
3157 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3160 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3161 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3162 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3165 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3167 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3168 a particular context, in just the same way:
3170 \c %define %$localmac 3
3172 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3173 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3174 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3177 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3179 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3180 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3181 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3182 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3183 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3185 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3186 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3187 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3192 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3195 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3197 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3198 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3199 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3215 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3229 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3234 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3235 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3236 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3237 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3240 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3241 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3242 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3243 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3244 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3246 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3247 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3248 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3249 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3250 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3252 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3274 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3275 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3276 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3277 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3280 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3282 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3283 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3285 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3287 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3289 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3292 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3294 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3295 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3296 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3298 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3299 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3300 convenient to use. and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3301 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3305 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3306 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3307 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3314 \c %pop ; restore original context
3316 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3317 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3318 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3319 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3322 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3324 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3325 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3326 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3327 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3328 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3332 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3333 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3334 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3336 \c %stacksize flat64
3338 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3339 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3340 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3344 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3345 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3346 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3350 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3351 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3352 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3353 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3354 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3355 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3356 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3360 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3362 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3363 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3364 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3365 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3366 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3367 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3368 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3370 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3371 An example of its use is the following:
3375 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3376 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3377 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3378 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3380 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3381 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3382 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3387 \c leave ; restore old bp
3390 \c %pop ; restore original context
3392 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3393 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3394 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3395 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3396 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3397 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3398 as shown in the example.
3401 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3403 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3404 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3405 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3406 right macros by means of code like this:
3411 \c ; do some different setup
3413 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3416 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3417 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3418 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3419 knowing what went wrong.
3421 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3426 \c ; do some different setup
3428 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3432 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3433 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3434 depend on symbol values.
3436 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3437 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3438 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3441 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3442 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3443 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3444 the user. For example:
3447 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3448 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3452 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3454 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3455 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3457 The following preprocessor directive is supported to allow NASM to
3458 correctly handle output of the cpp C language preprocessor.
3460 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of the cpp
3461 C language preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3463 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3464 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3466 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3468 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3469 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3470 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3471 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3472 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3473 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3476 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3477 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3478 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3480 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3482 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3483 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3484 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3485 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3486 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3487 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3489 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3490 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3494 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3496 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3497 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3498 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3499 could be used at some other point in your code.
3501 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3502 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3503 could do that as follows:
3505 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3507 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3510 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3512 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3513 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3514 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3515 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3516 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3518 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3519 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3520 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3524 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3526 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3527 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3528 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3529 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3530 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3531 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3532 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3534 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3535 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3538 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3540 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3541 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3542 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3543 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3544 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3545 would be equivalent to:
3553 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3554 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3555 values will be present in memory.
3558 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3560 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3561 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3570 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3572 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3573 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3574 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3575 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3576 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3577 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3579 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3580 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3581 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3582 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3583 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3584 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3585 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3586 here'. You could then write a macro
3588 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3597 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3598 find the crash point.
3601 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3603 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3604 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3605 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3606 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3607 mode-dependent macros.
3609 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3611 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3612 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3615 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3616 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3617 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3618 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3622 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3624 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3627 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3628 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3631 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3632 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3633 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3635 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3636 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3637 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3638 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3640 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3641 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3642 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3643 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3646 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3647 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3648 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3649 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3650 local time as if it was UTC.
3652 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3653 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3654 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3655 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3656 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3659 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3660 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3661 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3662 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3663 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3664 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3665 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3666 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3667 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3670 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3673 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3674 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3675 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3676 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3678 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3679 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3682 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3684 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3685 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3686 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3687 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3689 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3690 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3691 change in future versions of NASM.}
3694 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3696 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3697 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3698 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3699 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3701 \c{STRUC} takes one parameter, which is the name of the data type.
3702 This name is defined as a symbol with the value zero, and also has
3703 the suffix \c{_size} appended to it and is then defined as an
3704 \c{EQU} giving the size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been
3705 issued, you are defining the structure, and should define fields
3706 using the \c{RESB} family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke
3707 \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish the definition.
3709 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3710 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3721 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3722 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3723 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3724 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3726 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero is a side
3727 effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3728 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3729 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3740 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3741 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3743 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3744 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3745 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3746 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3747 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3748 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3749 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3752 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3753 \i{Instances of Structures}
3755 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
3756 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
3757 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
3758 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
3759 you code something like this:
3764 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
3765 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
3766 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
3767 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
3771 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
3772 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
3773 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
3774 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
3775 they were specified in the structure definition.
3777 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
3778 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
3779 the \c{AT} line. For example:
3781 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
3784 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
3785 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
3789 \c db 'hello, world'
3793 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
3795 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
3796 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
3797 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
3798 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
3800 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
3801 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
3802 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
3803 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
3804 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
3806 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
3807 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
3808 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
3809 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
3810 perform the alignment.
3812 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
3813 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
3814 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
3815 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
3816 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
3817 except for special purposes.
3819 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
3820 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
3821 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
3822 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
3825 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
3826 be used within structure definitions:
3843 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
3844 relative to the base of the structure.
3846 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
3847 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
3848 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
3849 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
3850 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
3851 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
3852 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
3854 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
3857 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
3859 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
3860 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
3861 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
3862 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
3864 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
3868 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
3870 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
3871 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
3872 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
3873 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
3874 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
3875 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
3882 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
3888 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
3890 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
3891 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
3892 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
3893 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
3894 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
3895 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
3896 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
3899 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
3900 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
3901 and an optional jump threshold override. The modes are as
3904 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
3905 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
3908 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
3909 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
3910 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
3912 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
3913 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
3916 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
3917 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
3920 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
3921 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
3922 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
3923 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
3925 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
3926 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
3927 are used internally by this macro package.
3930 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
3932 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
3933 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
3934 directives. These are described in this chapter.
3936 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
3937 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
3938 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
3939 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
3940 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
3941 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
3943 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
3946 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
3947 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
3948 order to control particular features of that file format. These
3949 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
3950 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
3953 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
3955 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
3956 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
3957 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
3958 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
3960 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
3961 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
3962 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
3963 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
3964 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
3965 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
3966 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
3967 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
3969 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
3970 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
3971 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
3972 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
3973 device drivers and boot loader software.
3975 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
3976 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
3977 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
3978 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
3980 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
3981 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
3982 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
3983 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
3984 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
3987 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
3988 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
3989 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
3991 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
3992 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
3993 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
3994 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
3995 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
3998 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
3999 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4000 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4001 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4004 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4005 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4006 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4008 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4010 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4012 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4013 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4016 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4018 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4019 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4020 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4021 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4024 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4025 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4026 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4027 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4028 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4029 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4031 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4032 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4033 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4034 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4036 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4038 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4041 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4042 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4043 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4044 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4045 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4046 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4047 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4050 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4051 \k{multisec}, all support
4052 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4053 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4054 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4055 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4059 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4061 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4062 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4063 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4064 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4065 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4066 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4067 it. So the user-level directive
4071 expands to the two lines
4073 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4076 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4077 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4078 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4080 \c %macro writefile 2+
4090 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4097 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4098 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4099 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4100 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4101 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4102 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4103 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4104 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4105 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4106 code in any of several separate code sections.
4109 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4111 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4112 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4113 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4114 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4115 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4117 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4125 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4126 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4127 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4129 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4130 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4132 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4133 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4135 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4136 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4137 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4138 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4140 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4142 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4144 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4146 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4150 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4151 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4155 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4156 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4157 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4158 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4159 needs to be made resident.
4162 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4164 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4165 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4166 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4167 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4168 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4169 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4171 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4172 argument is the name of a symbol:
4175 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4177 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4178 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4179 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4180 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4181 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4182 by means of the directive
4184 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4186 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4187 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4188 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4190 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4191 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4192 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4195 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4197 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4198 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4199 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4200 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4201 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4203 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4204 the definition of the symbol.
4206 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4207 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4208 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4214 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4215 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4216 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4219 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4221 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4222 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4226 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4228 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4229 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4230 uninitialized data section, so that
4234 is similar in function to
4241 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4242 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4243 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4244 at the same piece of memory.
4246 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4247 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4248 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4249 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4251 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4252 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4254 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4255 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4256 only one argument at a time.
4259 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4261 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4262 are available on the specified CPU.
4266 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4268 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4270 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4272 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4274 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4276 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4278 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4280 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4282 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4284 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4286 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4288 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4290 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4292 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4294 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4296 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4298 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4300 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4301 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4302 instructions are available.
4305 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4307 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4308 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4311 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4313 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4315 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4317 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4319 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4321 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4323 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4325 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4326 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4327 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4329 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4330 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4333 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4335 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4336 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4337 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4338 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4339 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4340 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4342 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4343 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4344 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4345 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4346 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4347 The extensions are given with each format below.
4350 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4352 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4353 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4354 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4355 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4356 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4359 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4360 how nasm handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4362 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4363 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4364 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4365 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4367 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4368 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4369 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4370 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4373 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4375 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4376 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4377 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4378 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4380 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4387 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4388 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4389 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4390 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4391 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4392 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4393 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4396 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4397 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4399 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4400 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4401 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4402 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4404 \c section .data align=16
4406 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4407 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4409 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4410 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4411 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4412 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4415 \S{multisec} \i\c{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} support for the BIN format.
4417 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4418 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4420 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4421 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4424 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4425 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4428 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4429 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4432 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4433 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4436 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4437 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4438 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4440 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4441 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4443 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4446 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4447 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4450 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4451 alignment has been specified.
4453 \b Sections may not overlap.
4455 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4456 which may be used in your code.
4458 \S{map}\i{Map files}
4460 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4461 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4462 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4463 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4464 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4465 brackets must be used.
4468 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4470 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4471 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4472 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4473 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4475 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4477 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4478 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4479 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4480 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4483 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4484 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4485 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4487 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4488 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4489 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4491 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4492 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4493 address of the segment. So, for example:
4502 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4503 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4504 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4507 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4508 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4513 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4515 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4517 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4518 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4521 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4522 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4524 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4525 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4526 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4527 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4529 \c segment code private align=16
4531 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4532 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4533 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4535 The available qualifiers are:
4537 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4538 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4539 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4540 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4541 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4542 than stuck end-to-end.
4544 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4545 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4546 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4547 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4548 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4549 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4550 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4551 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4552 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4554 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4555 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4556 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4557 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4559 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4560 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4561 overlay-capable linker.
4563 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4564 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4565 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4566 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4568 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4569 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4570 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4571 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4573 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4574 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4575 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4576 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4577 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4578 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4580 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4581 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4584 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4586 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4587 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4588 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4597 \c ; some uninitialized data
4599 \c group dgroup data bss
4601 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4602 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4603 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4604 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4605 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4608 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4609 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4610 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4611 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4612 base rather than the segment base.
4614 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4615 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4616 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4617 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4619 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4620 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4621 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4622 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4625 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4627 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4628 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4629 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4630 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4631 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4632 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4633 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4635 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4638 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4639 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4641 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4642 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4643 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4644 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4646 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4647 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4648 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4651 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4653 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4654 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4655 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4656 once you have imported it. For example:
4658 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4661 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4662 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4664 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4665 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4666 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4667 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4669 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4670 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4671 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4672 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4673 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4674 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4677 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4678 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4679 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4680 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4681 available attributes are:
4683 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4684 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4685 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4687 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4688 does not make use of any initialized data.
4690 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4691 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4692 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4694 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4695 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4701 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4702 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4703 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4706 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
4709 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
4710 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
4711 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
4712 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
4713 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
4717 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
4718 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
4720 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
4724 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
4725 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
4726 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
4727 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
4729 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
4730 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
4731 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
4733 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
4734 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
4735 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
4738 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
4740 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
4741 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
4744 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
4746 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
4747 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
4748 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
4751 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
4752 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
4753 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
4757 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
4758 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
4760 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
4761 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
4762 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
4764 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
4765 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
4767 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
4768 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
4769 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
4770 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
4771 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
4773 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
4774 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
4775 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
4776 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
4777 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
4780 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
4781 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
4783 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
4784 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
4785 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
4786 declarations could equivalently be
4788 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
4789 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
4791 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
4792 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
4793 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
4795 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
4796 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
4797 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
4800 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
4802 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
4803 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
4804 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
4805 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
4807 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4809 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
4810 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
4811 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
4812 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
4813 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
4814 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
4815 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
4816 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
4819 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4820 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
4822 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
4823 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
4824 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
4825 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
4826 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
4829 The available qualifiers are:
4831 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
4832 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
4833 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
4836 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
4837 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
4838 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
4839 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
4841 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
4842 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
4845 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
4846 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
4847 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
4848 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
4849 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
4852 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
4853 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
4854 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
4855 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
4856 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
4857 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
4858 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
4859 for data (and BSS) sections.
4860 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
4861 alignment), though the value does not matter.
4863 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
4866 \c section .text code align=16
4867 \c section .data data align=4
4868 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
4869 \c section .bss bss align=4
4871 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
4873 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
4875 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
4876 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
4877 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
4878 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
4879 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
4880 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
4881 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
4882 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
4883 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
4884 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
4885 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
4886 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
4887 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
4889 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
4890 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
4891 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
4893 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
4895 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
4897 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
4898 line to source code:
4902 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
4903 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
4904 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
4905 still be perfectly possible.
4907 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
4908 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
4909 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
4910 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
4911 table." Its typical use would be:
4914 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
4915 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
4916 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
4919 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
4920 \c push DWORD caption
4923 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
4924 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
4925 \c ; for exception handler
4929 \c push DWORD handler
4930 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
4931 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
4933 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
4934 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
4937 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
4938 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
4940 \c section .drectve info
4941 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
4943 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
4944 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
4945 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
4946 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
4947 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
4948 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
4949 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
4950 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
4951 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
4952 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
4953 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
4954 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
4955 caused application failure.
4957 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
4958 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
4959 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
4960 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
4961 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
4964 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
4966 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
4967 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
4968 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
4969 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
4970 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
4972 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
4974 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
4975 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
4976 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
4978 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
4984 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
4985 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
4986 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
4987 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
4990 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
4991 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
4993 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
4994 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
4995 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
4996 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
4997 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
4998 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
4999 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5000 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5001 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5003 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5004 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5007 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5011 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5012 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5013 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5014 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5015 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5016 these image-relative references:
5018 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5019 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5020 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5024 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5025 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5027 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5028 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5029 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5030 become apparent in next paragraph.
5032 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5035 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5036 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5037 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5038 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5040 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5042 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5043 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5044 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5045 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5046 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5047 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5048 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5049 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5050 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5051 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5052 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5055 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5056 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5057 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5058 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5059 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5060 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5061 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5062 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5063 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5064 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5065 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5066 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5067 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5068 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5069 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5070 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5071 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5072 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5073 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5074 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5075 no, no trace of failure is left.
5077 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5078 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5079 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5080 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5081 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5082 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5083 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5084 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5085 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5086 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5087 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5088 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5089 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5090 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5091 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5092 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5093 terminating the application.
5095 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5096 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5097 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5098 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5099 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5104 \c extern MessageBoxA
5110 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5112 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5113 \c ; for exception handler
5119 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5122 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5123 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5125 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5126 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5127 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5128 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5129 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5130 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5131 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5132 \c section .drectve info
5133 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5135 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5136 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5137 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5138 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5139 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5140 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5141 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5142 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5143 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5144 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5145 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5146 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5147 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5148 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5150 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5151 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5152 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5153 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5154 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5155 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5156 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5157 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5158 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5159 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5160 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5161 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5162 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5163 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5164 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5167 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5168 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5171 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5174 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5175 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5176 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5179 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5180 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5181 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5182 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5183 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5186 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5187 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5188 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5189 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5190 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5192 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5193 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5195 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5196 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5198 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5199 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5200 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5201 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5203 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5205 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5206 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5207 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5208 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5209 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5212 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5213 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5216 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5218 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5219 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5221 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5223 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5224 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5225 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5227 \H{machofmt} \i\c{macho}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5229 The \c{macho} output type produces \c{Mach-O} object files suitable for
5230 linking with the \i{Mac OSX} linker.
5232 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5234 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf, elf32, and elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5235 Format} Object Files
5237 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5238 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5239 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5240 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5242 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5244 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5245 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5246 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5247 most systems which support ELF.
5249 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5250 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5252 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5253 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5254 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5255 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5256 names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}, but may still be
5257 overridden by these qualifiers.
5259 The available qualifiers are:
5261 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5262 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5263 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5265 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5266 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5269 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5270 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5273 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5274 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5275 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5276 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5278 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5279 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5280 requirements of the section.
5282 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5285 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5286 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5287 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5288 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5289 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5291 (Any section name other than \c{.text}, \c{.rodata}, \c{.data} and
5292 \c{.bss} is treated by default like \c{other} in the above code.)
5295 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5296 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5298 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5299 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5300 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5301 be able to generate a variety of strange relocation types in ELF
5302 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5304 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5305 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5306 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5307 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5310 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5311 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5312 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5313 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5315 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5316 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5317 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5318 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5319 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5320 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5322 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5323 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5324 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5325 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5327 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5328 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5329 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5330 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5331 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5332 address of the symbol.
5334 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5335 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5336 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5337 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5338 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5339 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5342 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5343 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5344 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5345 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5346 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5347 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5349 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5350 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5353 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5354 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5356 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5357 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5358 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5359 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5360 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5361 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5362 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5363 to specify these features.
5365 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5366 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5367 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5368 \c{data}.) For example:
5370 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5372 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5373 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5375 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5376 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5377 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5378 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5380 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5382 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5383 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5384 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5386 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5389 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5392 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5393 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5395 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5396 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5400 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5401 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5403 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5404 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5405 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5406 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5407 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5408 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5410 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5412 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5413 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5416 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5417 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5419 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5420 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5421 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5422 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5423 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5424 these relocations is generated.
5426 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5427 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5429 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5430 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5431 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5433 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5435 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5436 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5437 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5438 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5439 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5440 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5441 implementation does not.
5443 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5445 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5446 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5447 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5448 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5451 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5452 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5454 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5455 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5456 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5457 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5458 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5459 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5460 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5462 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5464 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5465 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5466 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5467 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5468 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5470 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5471 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5475 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5477 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5478 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5479 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5480 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5483 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5484 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5486 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5487 of view). It supports no special directives, no special symbols, no
5488 use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no extensions to any standard
5489 directives. It supports only the three \i{standard section names}
5490 \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5493 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5496 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5497 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5498 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5499 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5501 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5502 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5503 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5504 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5506 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5507 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5508 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5509 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5510 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5512 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5513 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5516 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5518 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5519 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5520 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5521 which is the name of the module:
5523 \c library mylib.rdl
5526 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5528 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5529 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5530 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5535 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5536 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5537 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5539 \c module $kernel.core
5542 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive\I{GLOBAL,
5545 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5546 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5547 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5548 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5549 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5551 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5554 \c global sys_open:export
5556 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5557 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5559 \c global sys_open:export proc
5561 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5562 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5564 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5567 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} directive\I{EXTERN,
5570 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5571 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5572 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5573 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5574 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5575 (function) or data object. For example:
5578 \c extern _open:import
5579 \c extern _printf:import proc
5580 \c extern _errno:import data
5582 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5583 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5586 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5588 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5589 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5590 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{outform.h} or on the
5591 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5593 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5594 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5595 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5596 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5597 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5598 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5599 and in what order they happen.
5601 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5603 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5605 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5606 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5607 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5608 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5609 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5610 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5611 native object format selected:
5613 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5614 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5616 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5617 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5618 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5619 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5620 the final diagnostic output.
5622 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5623 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5624 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5625 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5626 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5627 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5628 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5630 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5631 them all to its output file.
5634 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5636 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5637 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5638 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5639 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5640 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5643 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5645 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5646 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5647 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5648 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5649 support the \c{.COM} format.
5651 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5652 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5653 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5654 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5655 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5656 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5657 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5659 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5663 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5665 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5666 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5668 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5669 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5670 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5671 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5672 An LZH archiver can be found at
5673 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
5674 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
5675 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
5676 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
5677 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
5678 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
5679 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
5680 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
5682 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
5683 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
5684 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
5685 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
5686 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
5687 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
5688 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
5690 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
5691 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
5692 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
5693 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
5694 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
5695 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
5706 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
5707 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
5708 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
5709 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
5710 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
5711 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
5714 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
5715 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
5716 into the resulting executable file.
5722 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
5723 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
5724 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
5725 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
5730 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
5734 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
5736 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
5738 \c segment stack stack
5742 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
5743 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
5744 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
5745 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
5746 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
5747 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
5750 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
5751 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
5752 world' and then exit.
5755 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5757 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
5758 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
5759 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
5760 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
5761 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
5764 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
5765 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
5766 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
5768 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
5769 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
5770 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
5771 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
5772 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
5773 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
5774 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
5775 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
5776 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
5778 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
5779 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
5780 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
5781 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
5782 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
5783 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
5784 explicitly issue one of your own.
5786 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
5787 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
5788 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
5789 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
5791 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
5792 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
5793 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
5794 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
5797 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
5798 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
5802 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
5804 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
5805 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
5806 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
5810 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5812 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
5813 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
5814 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
5815 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
5823 \c ; put your code here
5827 \c ; put data items here
5831 \c ; put uninitialized data here
5833 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
5834 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
5835 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
5838 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
5839 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
5840 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
5841 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
5842 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
5845 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
5847 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
5849 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
5850 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
5851 and give the desired file name.
5854 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5856 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
5857 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
5858 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
5859 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
5860 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
5861 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
5864 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
5866 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
5867 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
5868 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
5869 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
5870 adjust address references within the file when generating the
5871 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
5872 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
5873 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
5874 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
5876 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
5878 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
5879 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
5880 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
5881 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
5884 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
5886 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
5887 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
5888 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
5889 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
5890 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
5891 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
5894 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
5895 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
5896 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
5897 though it is not actually code.
5899 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
5900 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
5901 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
5902 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
5905 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
5907 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
5908 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
5909 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
5910 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
5913 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
5915 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
5916 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
5917 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
5918 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
5919 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
5920 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
5921 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
5922 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
5924 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
5925 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
5941 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
5942 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
5944 If you then declare an external like this:
5948 then the macro will expand it as
5951 \c %define printf _printf
5953 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
5954 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
5956 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
5957 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
5958 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
5960 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
5962 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
5964 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
5965 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
5966 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
5969 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
5970 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
5971 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
5972 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
5973 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
5974 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
5975 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
5976 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
5977 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
5978 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
5980 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
5981 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
5982 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
5983 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
5984 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
5985 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
5986 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
5988 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
5989 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
5990 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
5991 segment part of the full data item address).
5993 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
5994 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
5995 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
5996 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
5997 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
5998 pointers you are passed.
6000 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6001 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6002 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6003 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6004 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6006 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6007 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6008 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6009 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6010 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6011 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6012 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6013 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6014 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6015 variables in this latter case.
6017 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6018 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6019 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6020 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6024 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6026 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6027 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6028 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6029 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6031 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6032 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6033 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6035 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6036 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6039 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6040 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6041 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6042 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6043 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6044 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6045 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6046 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6048 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6049 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6050 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6051 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6052 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6053 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6054 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6055 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6056 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6057 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6058 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6059 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6060 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6063 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6064 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6065 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6067 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6068 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6069 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6070 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6072 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6073 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6074 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6077 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6078 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6079 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6080 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6081 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6082 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6083 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6086 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6087 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6088 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6089 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6090 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6091 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6092 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6093 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6094 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6095 sequence points without performance suffering.
6097 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6098 The following example is for small model:
6105 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6106 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6110 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6114 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6115 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6116 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6117 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6118 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6119 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6121 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6122 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6126 \c ; and then, further down...
6128 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6129 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6131 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6133 \c ; then those data items...
6138 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6140 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6143 \c int myint = 1234;
6144 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6146 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6147 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6148 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6151 \c push word [myint]
6152 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6153 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6157 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6158 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6159 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6160 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6161 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6162 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6163 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6164 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6165 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6166 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6170 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6172 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6173 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6174 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6175 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6176 accessed from assembler as
6182 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6183 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6184 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6190 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6191 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6192 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6193 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6194 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6195 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6196 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6197 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6199 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6200 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6201 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6202 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6203 one offset and using just that.
6205 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6206 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6207 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6208 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6209 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6216 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6217 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6218 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6219 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6220 out how your own compiler does it.
6223 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6225 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6226 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6227 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6228 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6229 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6231 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6232 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6234 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6241 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6242 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6247 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6248 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6249 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6251 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6252 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6253 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6254 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6255 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6256 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6257 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6259 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6260 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6261 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6262 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6263 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6264 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6265 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6267 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6268 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6269 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6271 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6279 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6280 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6281 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6286 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6287 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6288 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6291 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6293 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6294 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6296 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6297 not required for Pascal.
6299 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6300 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6301 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6302 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6303 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6304 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6305 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6306 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6307 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6308 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6309 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6310 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6312 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6314 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6316 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6317 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6318 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6321 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6323 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6324 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6325 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6326 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6329 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6330 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6331 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6333 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6334 control to the callee.
6336 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6337 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6338 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6339 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6340 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6341 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6342 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6343 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6345 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6346 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6347 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6348 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6349 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6350 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6351 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6353 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6354 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6355 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6357 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6358 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6359 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6360 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6361 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6362 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6363 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6364 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6365 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6366 \c{RETF} instruction.
6368 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6369 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6370 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6371 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6372 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6373 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6376 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6377 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6380 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6381 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6387 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6388 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6389 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6393 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6395 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6397 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6398 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6402 \c ; and then, further down...
6404 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6405 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6406 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6407 \c call far SomeFunc
6409 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6411 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6412 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6415 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6418 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6419 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6420 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6421 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6422 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6425 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6426 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6428 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6429 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6431 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6432 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6434 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6435 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6438 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6440 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6441 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6442 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6443 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6444 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6445 generated with an operand.
6447 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6448 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6449 reverse order. For example:
6457 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6458 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6459 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6464 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6465 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6466 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6467 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6468 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6469 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6473 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6475 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6476 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6477 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6478 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6479 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6482 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6483 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6484 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6485 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6486 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6487 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6488 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6489 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6490 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6491 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6492 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6493 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6497 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6499 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6500 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6501 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6504 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6506 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6507 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6508 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6509 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6510 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6511 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6513 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6514 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6515 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6516 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6517 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6519 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6521 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6523 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6524 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6525 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6526 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6528 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6529 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6530 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6532 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6533 control to the callee.
6535 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6536 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6537 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6538 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6539 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6540 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6541 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6542 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6544 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6545 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6546 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6547 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6548 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6549 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6550 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6551 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6552 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6553 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6554 and type of the remaining ones.
6556 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6557 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6558 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6560 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6561 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6562 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6565 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6566 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6567 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6569 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6570 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6571 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6572 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6573 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6574 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6575 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6578 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6579 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6580 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6581 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6582 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6583 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6584 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6586 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6593 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6594 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6598 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6601 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6602 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6606 \c ; and then, further down...
6608 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6609 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6611 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6613 \c ; then those data items...
6618 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6620 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6622 \c int myint = 1234;
6623 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6626 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6628 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6629 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6630 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6631 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6632 accessed from assembler as
6637 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6638 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6639 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6644 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6645 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6646 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6647 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6648 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6649 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6650 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6651 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6652 are also 4 bytes long.
6654 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6655 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6656 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6657 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6658 one offset and using just that.
6660 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6661 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6662 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6663 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6664 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6671 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6672 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6673 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6674 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6675 out how your own compiler does it.
6678 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
6680 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
6681 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6682 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6683 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6684 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6686 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6693 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
6694 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
6699 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
6700 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6701 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6703 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6704 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6705 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6706 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6707 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6708 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6709 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6711 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6712 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
6713 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
6716 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
6719 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
6720 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
6721 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
6722 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
6723 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
6725 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
6726 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
6727 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
6728 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
6730 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
6731 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
6732 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
6733 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
6735 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
6738 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
6740 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
6741 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
6742 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
6743 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
6744 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
6745 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
6746 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
6748 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
6749 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
6750 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
6751 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
6752 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
6753 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
6756 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
6758 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
6761 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
6762 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
6764 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
6765 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
6766 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
6775 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
6777 \c ; the function body comes here
6784 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
6785 second leading underscore.)
6787 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
6788 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
6789 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
6790 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
6791 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
6793 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
6794 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
6795 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
6796 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
6797 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
6798 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
6799 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
6800 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
6801 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
6802 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
6803 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
6804 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
6805 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
6806 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
6807 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
6808 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
6810 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
6811 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
6812 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
6819 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
6823 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
6825 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
6826 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
6827 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
6828 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
6829 way this works is like this:
6831 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
6833 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
6834 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
6835 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
6836 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
6838 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
6839 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
6840 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
6841 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
6842 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
6843 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
6845 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
6846 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
6847 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
6850 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
6852 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
6853 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
6854 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
6855 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
6856 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
6857 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
6858 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
6859 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
6860 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
6863 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
6865 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
6866 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
6867 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
6868 has every necessary entry present.
6870 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
6873 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
6875 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
6876 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
6877 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
6878 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
6879 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
6880 items away from the library's data section in which they were
6883 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
6885 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
6891 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
6893 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
6898 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
6899 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
6900 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
6901 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
6902 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
6903 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
6904 effectively, it has become).
6906 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
6907 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
6910 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
6912 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
6913 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
6914 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
6915 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
6916 which resides elsewhere.
6918 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
6920 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
6922 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
6923 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
6924 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
6926 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
6927 functions by means of
6929 \c funcptr: dd my_function
6931 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
6933 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt .sym
6935 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
6936 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
6937 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
6940 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
6942 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
6943 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
6944 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
6945 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
6946 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
6947 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
6948 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
6951 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
6952 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
6953 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
6954 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
6958 \S{link} Generating the Library File
6960 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
6961 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
6963 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
6964 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
6966 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
6967 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
6968 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
6969 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
6971 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
6973 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
6974 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
6977 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
6979 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
6980 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
6981 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
6982 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
6983 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
6984 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
6987 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
6989 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
6990 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
6991 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
6992 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
6993 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
6994 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
6995 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
6996 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
6998 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
6999 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7000 segment, so just coding, for example,
7002 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7004 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7005 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7008 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7009 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7010 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7011 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7013 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7015 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7016 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7017 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7018 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7019 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7020 segment to a 32-bit one.
7022 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7023 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7025 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7027 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7028 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7029 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7032 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7033 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7035 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7036 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7037 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7038 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7039 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7041 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7042 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7043 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7044 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7046 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7047 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7048 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7050 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7051 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7053 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7054 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7055 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7056 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7057 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7059 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7060 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7062 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7064 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7065 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7066 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7068 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7070 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7071 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7072 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7073 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7075 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7077 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7080 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7081 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7083 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7085 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7086 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7087 offset), and calls that address.
7090 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7092 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7093 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7094 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7095 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7096 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7098 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7099 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7100 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7101 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7105 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7106 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7107 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7108 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7110 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7111 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7112 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7113 instructions with implicit addressing:
7114 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7115 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7116 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7117 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7118 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7119 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7121 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7122 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7123 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7124 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7125 size from the code segment.
7127 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7128 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7129 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7130 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7131 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7132 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7137 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7138 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7141 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7142 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7145 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7147 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7148 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7149 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7150 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7152 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7153 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7154 registers, which still add their bases.
7156 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7157 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7158 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7159 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7160 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7162 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7163 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7164 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7165 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7166 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7168 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7169 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7170 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7171 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7173 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7174 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7175 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7178 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7180 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7181 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7183 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7184 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7185 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7186 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7188 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7189 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7190 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7191 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7192 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7193 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7194 can be used for this purpose.
7196 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7198 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7199 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7200 immediates to 32 bits.
7202 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7206 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7207 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7208 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7209 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7210 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7212 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7213 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7214 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7215 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7217 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7219 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7220 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7221 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7222 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7223 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7224 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7228 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7229 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7230 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7234 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7235 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7236 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7237 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7239 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7240 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7242 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7244 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7246 \W{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}\c{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}
7248 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7249 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7251 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7252 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7253 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7254 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7255 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7257 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7259 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7260 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7261 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7262 stack, and returned in \c{ST(0)} and \c{ST(1)}.
7264 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7266 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7268 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7270 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7272 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7274 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7276 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7278 \W{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}\c{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}
7280 What follows is a simplified summary.
7282 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7283 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7284 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7285 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7286 use by the function without saving.
7288 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7290 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7291 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7292 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7294 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7296 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7298 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7300 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7302 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7304 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7305 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7306 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7307 that isn't listed here.
7310 \H{problems} Common Problems
7312 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7314 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7315 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7316 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7317 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7318 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7319 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7320 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7321 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7322 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7325 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7327 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7328 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7329 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7332 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7333 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7334 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7335 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7336 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7337 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7338 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7339 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7340 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7341 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7342 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7343 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7346 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7348 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7349 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7350 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7351 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7355 \c ; some boot sector code
7360 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7361 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7362 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7366 \c ; some boot sector code
7368 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7371 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7372 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7373 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7374 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7375 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7376 find out what's wrong with it.
7379 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7381 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7386 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7387 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7390 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7391 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7392 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7393 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7394 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7395 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7396 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7397 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7398 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7399 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7401 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7404 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7406 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7407 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7408 problem and generate sensible code.
7411 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7413 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7414 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7415 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7417 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7418 (click on "Bugs"), or if that fails then through one of the
7419 contacts in \k{contact}.
7421 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7422 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7423 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7424 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7425 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7426 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7429 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7432 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7433 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7435 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7436 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7437 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7438 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7439 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7440 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7443 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7444 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7445 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7447 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7448 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7449 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7450 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7451 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7452 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7453 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7454 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7456 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7457 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7458 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7459 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7460 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7461 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7462 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7463 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7464 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7465 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7466 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7467 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7468 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7470 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7471 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7472 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7473 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7474 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7475 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7476 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7477 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7478 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7479 should be 77 instead'.
7481 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7482 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7483 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7484 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7485 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7486 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7487 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7490 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7491 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7492 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7493 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7494 differently from us.
7497 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7499 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7501 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7504 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7505 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7506 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7507 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7508 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7510 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7511 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7512 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7513 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7517 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7519 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7520 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7521 are on a Unix system.
7524 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7526 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7528 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7530 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7531 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7532 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7533 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7535 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7536 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7537 summary of command line options.
7540 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7542 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7543 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7544 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7545 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7548 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7549 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7550 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7551 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7552 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7554 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7556 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7561 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7563 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7564 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7565 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7566 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7567 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7568 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7569 Then it will reach the code section.
7571 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7572 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7573 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7574 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7575 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7576 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7577 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7580 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7581 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7582 only handle 8192 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7583 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7584 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7585 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7586 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7587 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7588 the instructions in your code section.
7590 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7591 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7592 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7595 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7599 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7601 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7602 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7605 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7608 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7609 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7610 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7611 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7612 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7613 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7616 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7617 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7618 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7619 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7621 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7622 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7623 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7624 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7625 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7626 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7627 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7629 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7630 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7631 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7632 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7633 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7635 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7636 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7637 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7638 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7639 you may still have to place some manually.
7641 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7642 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7643 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7646 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7647 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7648 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7649 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7650 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7651 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7652 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7653 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7654 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7657 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7659 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7660 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7661 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7662 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7664 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7665 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7666 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7667 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7668 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7672 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
7674 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
7675 possible, should be sent to
7676 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
7678 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7679 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
7680 new features as well.
7682 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
7684 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
7686 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
7687 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
7688 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
7689 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
7693 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}